©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under
license. Chrysler est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple
Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
mopar.com/om
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter
the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
CHRYSLER
_LX_OM_EN_USC
First Edition
2021 Chrysler 300
OWNER’S MANUAL
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual
that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without
imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 (U.S.)
or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal
injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any
electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and
could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your
full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Chrysler brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment
is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 7
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................12
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................73
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 93
5 MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................143
6 SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................159
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................210
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 228
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 287
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................294
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................299
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Key............................................................ 8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .......... 8
Symbol Glossary..................................................... 8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ......................................................................12
Key Fob......................................................... 12
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................14
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................15
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition.....................15
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .........................17
How To Use Remote Start ...........................17
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................ 18
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped ................................................... 18
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ................................................... 19
Remote Start Cancel Message ................... 19
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..... 20
To Arm The System...................................... 20
To Disarm The System.................................20
Rearming Of The System............................. 21
Security System Manual Override ..............21
Tamper Alert................................................. 21
DOORS .................................................................. 21
Manual Door Locks...................................... 21
Power Door Locks ....................................... 22
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .......... 22
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit................. 25
Automatic Door Locks —
If Equipped................................................... 25
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ................................................... 25
STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 26
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped ................................. 26
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped ................................. 26
Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped................................................... 27
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS ....28
Introducing Uconnect .................................. 28
Basic Voice Commands............................... 28
Get Started................................................... 28
Additional Information................................. 29
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED... 29
Programming The Memory Feature............ 29
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob
To Memory ................................................... 30
Memory Position Recall............................... 30
SEATS ....................................................................30
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 31
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) ................ 32
Heated Seats — If Equipped ...................... 34
Front Ventilated Seats —
If Equipped .................................................. 36
Head Restraints .......................................... 36
MIRRORS ..............................................................38
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 38
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors........................... 38
Outside Mirrors............................................ 39
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped.................................... 39
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal
And Approach Lighting — If Equipped ........ 39
Power Mirrors............................................... 39
Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped................................................... 40
Heated Mirrors — If Equippe ...................... 41
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
If Equipped................................................... 41
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) ......................................................41
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink® .................................................. 42
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels........42
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device ..............42
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener.................................................43
Programming HomeLink® To
A Miscellaneous Device ..............................44
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button...........................................................44
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 44
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................45
Headlight Switch..........................................45
Multifunction Lever...................................... 46
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) .................. 46
High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 46
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ......... 46
Flash-To-Pass ...............................................47
Automatic Headlights ..................................47
Parking Lights ............................................. 47
Headlights On With Wipers ......................... 47
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped ............................48
Headlight Time Delay ..................................48
Lights-On Reminder .................................... 48
Fog Lights — If Equipped .............................48
Turn Signals ................................................ 49
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 49
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................ 49
Interior Courtesy Lights ............................... 49
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS............. 51
Windshield Wiper Operation ....................... 51
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........... 52
CLIMATE CONTROLS ........................................... 53
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions .............................................. 53
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...... 56
Climate Voice Commands........................... 57
Operating Tips ............................................. 57
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............. 59
Storage ......................................................... 59
USB/AUX Control ........................................ 61
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped.............. 61
Heated And Cooled Cupholders —
If Equipped .................................................. 62
Power Sunshade — If Equipped.................. 62
Power Outlets............................................... 63
WINDOWS ............................................................ 65
Power Window Controls .............................. 65
Automatic Window Features ...................... 65
Reset Auto-Up ............................................. 66
Window Lockout Switch .............................. 66
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 66
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........... 67
Opening And Closing The Sunroof.............. 67
Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 68
Venting Sunroof........................................... 68
Opening And Closing The Power Shade..... 68
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 68
Ignition Off Operation.................................. 68
HOOD .....................................................................69
Opening The Hood....................................... 69
Closing The Hood......................................... 69
TRUNK ...................................................................69
Opening The Trunk ...................................... 69
Closing The Trunk........................................ 70
Trunk Safety................................................. 70
Cargo Area Features ................................... 71
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ........72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .......................................73
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ................ 75
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .......................75
Location And Controls ................................. 76
Engine Oil Life Reset .................................. 77
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Menu Items.................................................. 78
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped.................................. 81
Programmable Features ............................. 82
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..................82
Red Warning Lights...................................... 82
Yellow Warning Lights .................................85
Yellow Indicator Lights.................................89
Green Indicator Lights.................................89
White Indicator Lights..................................90
Blue Indicator Lights....................................90
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .......90
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity................................................ 91
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................................................91
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ........................................93
Automatic Transmission ............................. 93
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition.....................93
Normal Starting............................................ 94
AutoPark....................................................... 95
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ...........................96
If Engine Fails To Start ................................ 96
After Starting................................................97
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ..........97
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS..........97
PARKING BRAKE ..................................................98
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION.............................. 99
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................100
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (
BTSI) System..............................................100
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission ......100
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED ..........................106
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................106
POWER STEERING .............................................106
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED .. 107
Cruise Control — If Equipped.....................107
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped.................................................109
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED......................................120
ParkSense Sensors ...................................120
ParkSense Display.....................................120
ParkSense Warning Display......................124
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........124
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System........................................................125
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............125
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....125
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ............................127
LaneSense Operation................................127
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................127
LaneSense Warning Message ..................127
Changing LaneSense Status.....................129
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............. 129
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................................. 131
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ........132
VEHICLE LOADING............................................. 132
Vehicle Certification Label ........................133
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).......133
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ...........133
Overloading................................................133
Loading.......................................................133
TRAILER TOWING .............................................. 134
Common Towing Definitions.....................134
Trailer Hitch Classification ........................136
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .........................................136
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................137
Towing Requirements ...............................137
Towing Tips ...............................................139
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME).................................................... 140
DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 140
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................140
Driving Through Water .............................141
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ....................................... 143
CYBERSECURITY ............................................... 143
UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................................... 144
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings ................144
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 158
Regulatory And Safety Information...........158
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 159
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................159
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System....160
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 166
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped .................................................166
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation — If Equipped ..........170
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)...172
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................. 176
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....176
Important Safety Precautions ...................176
Seat Belt Systems .....................................177
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...184
Child Restraints..........................................193
SAFETY TIPS....................................................... 206
Transporting Passengers ..........................206
Transporting Pets.......................................206
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle .....................................206
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle ........................208
Exhaust Gas ..............................................209
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................209
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................210
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ....210
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................214
Preparations For Jacking ..........................214
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage...........214
Jacking And Changing A Tire ....................215
JUMP STARTING ................................................218
Preparations For Jump Start.....................218
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................219
REFUELING IN AN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................221
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .........................222
MANUAL PARK RELEASE .................................222
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................224
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ........................225
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ..................226
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models..............226
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) .................................................227
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) .......................227
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ..................................228
Maintenance Plan .....................................229
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 232
3.6L Engine ...............................................232
5.7L Engine ...............................................233
Checking Oil Level .....................................234
Adding Washer Fluid .................................234
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................234
Pressure Washing......................................235
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................................. 235
Engine Oil ..................................................236
Engine Oil Filter..........................................236
Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................237
Air Conditioner Maintenance....................237
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............239
Body Lubrication........................................239
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................240
Exhaust System .........................................241
Cooling System .........................................243
Brake System ............................................246
Automatic Transmission ...........................247
All Wheel Drive (AWD) —
If Equipped ................................................248
Rear Axle ....................................................248
Fuses..........................................................248
Bulb Replacement.....................................259
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
TIRES ................................................................... 263
Tire Safety Information..............................263
Tires — General Information .....................271
Tire Types ...................................................275
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................276
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................278
Snow Traction Devices ..............................280
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............281
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................... 282
Treadwear ..................................................282
Traction Grades .........................................282
Temperature Grades .................................282
VEHICLE STORAGE ............................................ 283
BODYWORK........................................................ 283
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......283
Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........283
Preserving The Bodywork..........................284
INTERIORS ......................................................... 284
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................284
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................285
Leather Surfaces .......................................286
Glass Surfaces ..........................................286
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN).......287
BRAKE SYSTEM .................................................287
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS... 287
Torque Specifications................................287
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .......................................288
3.6L Engine................................................288
5.7L Engine................................................288
Reformulated Gasoline .............................289
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................289
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .....................289
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex
Fuel Vehicles..............................................289
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...290
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ..................290
Fuel System Cautions................................290
FLUID CAPACITIES .............................................291
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS..................291
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...............293
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE .......................................... 294
Prepare For The Appointment ..................294
Prepare A List.............................................294
Be Reasonable With Requests.................294
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 294
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................295
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........295
Mexico ........................................................295
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............295
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................295
Service Contract .......................................295
WARRANTY INFORMATION .............................. 296
MOPAR PARTS................................................... 296
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 296
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................296
In Canada...................................................297
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 297
General Information.......................................... 298
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Chrysler vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help
ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement
of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that the authorized dealers know your Chrysler vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine MOPAR®
parts, and care about your satisfaction.
1
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol Ú page 75.
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 82
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 82
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 83
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 84
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
Ú page 84
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 84
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 84
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 85
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 85
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 83
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 85
Trunk Open Warning Light
Ú page 85
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 85
Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
Ú page 87
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 86
Red Warning Lights
1
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 86
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 87
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
Ú page 88
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 87
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 86
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
— If Equipped
Ú page 87
Yellow Warning Lights
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 87
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 86
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 86
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 85
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning OFF Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 89
Yellow Warning Lights
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Vehicle Light — If Equipped
Ú page 89
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
Ú page 89
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 89
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 89
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 89
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 89
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 90
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 90
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 90
1
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter-N-Go (if equipped),
Remote Start (if equipped), and remote trunk
release. The key fob allows you to lock or unlock
the doors and trunk from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate
the system. The key fob also contains an
emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the
key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked
if the key fob is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop, or other electronic device.
This may result in poor performance.
With ignition in the ON position and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
commands are disabled.
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow
Ú page 298.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Trunk
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
within five seconds to unlock all the doors and
the trunk. To lock all the doors and the trunk,
push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
1 — Unlock
2 — Trunk Open
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — PANIC Button
6 — Emergency Key
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and the security system
will arm (if equipped).
If one or more doors are open, or the trunk is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will
unlock automatically if the key fob is left
inside the passenger compartment, other-
wise the doors will stay locked.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button through
Uconnect Settings Ú page 144.
NOTE:
When you use the key fob to open any door, the
courtesy lights, overhead lights, and approach
lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped) will
turn on Ú page 49.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the trunk button on the key fob two times
within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a
battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
tion.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding
the emergency key release (1) on the back
of the key fob and pull the emergency key
out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat
blade screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry
the two halves of the key fob apart. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the back cover to access and
replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the (+) sign on the battery to
the (+) sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils
may cause battery deterioration. If you
touch a battery, clean it with rubbing
alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF mode.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key
fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics Ú page 298.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are
OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available (e.g.
power windows).
ON/RUN
Driving position.
All the electrical devices are available (e.g
climate controls, etc.).
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the
brake pedal).
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change the mode
by pushing the button, the key fob may have a
low or depleted battery. In this situation, a back
up method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE:
When opening the driver's door with the igni-
tion in ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime
will sound to remind you to place the ignition
in the OFF position. In addition to the chime,
the message will display “Ignition Or Acces-
sory On” in the cluster.
For more information on proper engine
starting procedures, see Ú page 93.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security.
Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the driver enters
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
may reduce this range Ú page 298.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the remote start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp twice (if programmed through
the Uconnect settings). Then, the engine will
start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote
Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing the
remote start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
and with a valid Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob in
the vehicle, press the brake pedal and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
Remote Start can only be used twice. The
ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can
be repeated for a third cycle.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start system, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Trunk closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Check engine light shall not be present
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an
intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
Start system, either push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security
system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of
the 15 minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote
Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is
allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the
previously set operations (temperature, blower
control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the
system will disable for two seconds after
receiving a valid Remote Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP igni-
tion button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When remote start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the system will automatically activate front defrost
for 15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on
the ambient temperature. Once the timer expires,
the system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start system, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When remote start is activated, the front and
rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will turn on if selected in
the comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 144. In warm weather, the
driver vented seat feature will turn on when
remote start is activated, if programmed in the
Comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust
the climate control settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls will be automatically
adjusted to the optimal temperature and mode
settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature. This will occur until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous
settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) —
If Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
based on the last settings selected by the
driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to MAX
A/C, Bi-Level Mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 53.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings
will change if manually adjusted by the driver
while the vehicle is in remote start mode, and
exit automatic override. This includes the OFF
button on the climate controls, which will turn
the system off.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The instrument cluster display message stays
active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, trunk, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security system is armed, interior
switches for door locks and trunk release are
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security system will provide the following
audible and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry door handle with a valid key
fob available in the same exterior zone
Ú page 22.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 22.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security system. Use of the door
key cylinder when the system is armed will
sound the alarm when the door is opened.
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to
unlock the trunk, the Vehicle Security system
is disarmed and the rest of the vehicle doors
will remain locked unless “Unlock All Doors
1st Press” is selected in the Passive Entry
settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm, regardless of whether you are
in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five
seconds between cycles, and up to eight cycles
if the trigger remains active. The Vehicle
Security system will then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security
system in your absence, the horn will sound
three times and the exterior lights will blink
three times when you disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked
from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
knob. To lock each door, push the door lock
knob on each door trim panel downward. To
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim
panel upward. If the lock knob is down when
the door is closed, the door will lock. Make
sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
Door Lock Knob
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security system.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and leave the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or
unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
keys are found inside the vehicle when the door
lock button on the front door panel is used to
lock the door. This will occur for two attempts.
Upon the third attempt, the doors will lock even
if the key is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door
may not unlock automatically.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's
door is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle without first unlocking
the door. The door may be unlocked manually
by raising the lock knob.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 144.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the Passive Entry handle from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
position lamps) for whichever time duration
is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds.
Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signal lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and (if equipped) will arm
the Vehicle Security system.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the door handle, grab the handle to unlock
the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door handle
will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock
both doors automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is
programmed, all doors will unlock when you
grab hold of the front driver’s door handle. To
select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 144.
All doors will unlock when the front
passenger door handle is grabbed regardless
of the driver’s door unlock preference
setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition is in the OFF position.
There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and
alert the customer.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the
doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either
Passive Entry door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Trunk
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either door handle,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock
both doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the
right side of the Center High Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL), which is located on the deck lid.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE:
If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive
Entry key fob in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch,
unless another one of the vehicle’s Passive
Entry key fobs is outside the vehicle and within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid Ú page 298.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature is enabled within Uconnect
Settings
Ú
page 144.
2. The transmission gear selector was not in
PARK, then is placed in PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
NOTE:
Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
can be enabled or disabled by an authorized
dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using
the outside door handle even though the
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the unlocked position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked posi-
tion), roll down the window, and open the
door with the outside door handle.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to
open a door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
it is impossible to open the doors from inside
the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping control is located below the
steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control
To unlock the steering column, push the control
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock
the steering column in position, push the
control upward until fully engaged.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
power tilt/telescoping steering column control
is located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering
column.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside with the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Settings Ú page 29, you can use your key fob or
the memory switch on the driver's door trim
panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering
column to saved positions.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an
average of 80 minutes before automatically
shutting off. This time will vary based on
environmental temperatures. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control button through the
climate or controls screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 19.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
INTRODUCING UCONNECT
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR)
with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your Uconnect system.
NOTE:
The NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps
menus, of your touchscreen, shows you have
the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 4C system.
Voice Recognition
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear
on the touchscreen.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate
your VR system.
Helpful hints for using VR:
Reduce background noise. Wind and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push the VR button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command from the
current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The VR Button To Begin Radio, Media,
And Climate Functions
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visitwww.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visitwww.siriusxm.ca/
guardian-v1/ or call: 1-877-324-9091
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory profile
saves desired position settings for the following
features:
Driver seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off) (if
equipped)
Side mirrors
Power tilt and telescopic steering column (if
equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs,
each can be linked to either memory position
1 or 2.
Be sure to program the radio presets prior to
programming the memory settings.
The memory settings switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Switch
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt
and telescopic steering column [if
equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, and then push the desired
memory button (1 or 2) within five seconds.
The instrument cluster display will display
which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to
recall a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one
of two saved memory profiles by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must
select the “Memory Linked To Fob” feature
through the Uconnect system Ú page 144.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push
and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release
button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed
by pushing the unlock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or
two, push the desired memory button number
(1 or 2) or the unlock button on the key fob
linked to the desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall.
When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will
stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to
provide an additional storage area. To fold the
rear seatback, pull on the loops located on the
upper seatback.
NOTE:
These loops can be tucked away when not in
use.
Rear Seatback Loop
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded
forward.
Folded Rear Seatback
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
When the seatback is folded to the upright
position, make sure it is latched by strongly
pulling on the top of the seatback above the
seat strap.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position, the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle
(with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or
folded down position) should not be used
as a play area by children when the vehicle
is in motion. They could be seriously injured
in a collision. Children should be seated
and using the proper restraint system.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
Your vehicle may be equipped with eight-way
power driver and front passenger seats. The
power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat
cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the power seat switch. The
seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down by using the power seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down using the power seat switch. The
front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using the power seat
switch. The seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
1 — Seatback Control (If Equipped)
2 — Seat Control
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or
downward on the switch will raise and lower the
position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
OFF position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the vehicle’s ignition
in the ACC or RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than 0.9
of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each
memory setting profile Ú page 29.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or
disabled through the programmable features in
the Uconnect system Ú page 144.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front and rear seats may
be equipped with heaters located in the seat
cushions and seat backs.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seat control buttons are
located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat
settings. The indicator arrows in touchscreen
buttons indicate the level of heat in use. Two
indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, and one
for LO. Turning the heating elements off will
return the user to the radio screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 19.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats
may be equipped with heated seats. There are
two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat
settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none
for OFF.
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater
will provide a boosted heat level during the first
four minutes of operation. Then, the heat
output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the
HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the number of indicator
lights changes from two to one, indicating the
change. The LO-level setting will turn off
automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The ventilated seats are equipped with fans
that can be controlled through the climate and
control screen in the Uconnect system. The fans
operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time
to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 19.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back
of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are
equipped with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR).
In the event of a rear impact, the RHR will
automatically extend forward minimizing the
gap between the back of the occupant’s head
and the RHR.
The RHR will automatically return to their
normal position following a rear impact. If the
RHR do not return to their normal position, see
an authorized dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located at the base
of the head restraint and push downward on the
head restraint.
Front Head Restraint
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
(Continued)
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable
positions: up or down. When the center seat is
being occupied, the head restraint should be in
the raised position. When there are no occupants
in the center seat, the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located at the base
of the head restraint and push downward on the
head restraint.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The head restraint should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes
only. If the center rear head restraint requires
removal, see an authorized dealer.
The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as
it can go. Then, push the adjustment button and
the release button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Do not place items over the top of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These items
may interfere with the operation of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint in the event of a collision
and could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always
securely stow removed head restraints in a
location outside the occupant compartment.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is
disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to
improve the driver’s rear view.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned
on or off through the Uconnect system
Ú page 144.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun
blockage.
Slide-On-Rod Feature
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional
sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the
center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve
the optimal view.
DRIVER'S OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC
D
IMMING MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically
adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This
feature is controlled by the inside automatic
dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN SIGNAL
A
ND APPROACH LIGHTING —
I
F EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn
signal and approach lighting contain four LEDs,
which are located in the upper outer corner of
each mirror.
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators,
which flash with the corresponding turn signal
lights in the front and rear of the vehicle.
Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also
activate these LEDs.
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry
lighting, which turns on in both mirrors when
you use the key fob or open any door. This LED
shines outward to illuminate the front and rear
door handles. It also shines downward to
illuminate the area in front of the doors.
The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after
about 30 seconds or it will fade to off
immediately once the ignition is placed into the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The approach lighting will not function when the
gear selector is moved out of the PARK position.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver's door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push the mirror select
button for the mirror that you want to adjust.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much on
side convex mirrors could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance
of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Controls
Power mirror preselected positions can be
controlled by the optional Driver Memory
Settings feature Ú page 29.
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can
be electrically folded rearward and unfolded
into the drive position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located between the power mirror switches L
(left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the
mirrors will fold in, pushing the switch a second
time will return the mirrors to the normal driving
position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically
cycled, a potential extra button push is required
to get the mirrors back to the drive position. If
the mirror does not electrically fold, check for
ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can
cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Automatic Folding Mirrors
When the Automatic Folding Mirrors feature is
enabled, the exterior mirrors will fold in when
exiting the vehicle (with the ignition OFF and all
doors closed and locked).
If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they
will unfold when the ignition is placed in the
ON position.
If the exterior mirrors were manually folded,
they will not automatically unfold.
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Right Mirror Selection
3 — Left Mirror Selection
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE:
The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 144.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors
if the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
The mirrors come out of the unfolded posi-
tion.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors, fold and
unfold them by pushing the button (this may
require multiple button pushes). This resets
them to their normal position.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt
frost or ice. This feature will be
activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped)
Ú page 53.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will assist with the driver’s
ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The
outside mirrors will then return to the original
position when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE. If the vehicle is equipped with
memory settings, this feature will be linked to
the programmable settings.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 144.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting, or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles
12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink® channels.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To operate HomeLink®, push and release
any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located
above the center button.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink® before you use it
for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming
additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after 1995
have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code
will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately
visible when looking at the device. The name
and color of the button may vary slightly by
manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow
the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all
channels when programming additional
buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1
to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The
HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly. Once this happens,
release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener motor. Firmly push
and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three
times (holding the button for two seconds
each time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
Follow the procedure on programming
HomeLink® to a garage door opener
Ú page 43. Be sure to determine if the device
has a rolling code, or non-rolling code before
beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure
may need to be performed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that
has been previously trained, without erasing all
the channels, follow the procedure below. Be
sure to determine whether the new device you
want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a rolling code or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the HomeLink® Indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all
remaining steps.
CANADIAN /GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some US gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage
or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the Home-
Link® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps
Ú page 298.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, interior lights and fog
lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a
headlight switch without the OFF position. In
order to turn the exterior lights off, the headlight
switch must be rotated to AUTO position.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also turned
on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the
headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise from the parking light and
instrument panel light position to the AUTO
position for automatic headlights. Rotate to the
second detent to turn on headlight, parking light,
and instrument panel light operation.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when
the engine is started and will remain on unless
the headlights are turned to the on position, the
parking brake is applied, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect system Ú page 144.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running
Lights may deactivate or reduce intensity on
one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is
activated on that side), or on both sides of
the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights
are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever
back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting or dese-
lecting “Auto High Beam” within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 144, as well as turning the
headlight switch to the AUTO position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the
mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper
performance. See a local authorized dealer.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When
the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after placing
the ignition in the OFF position. The headlight
time delay can be programmed 0/30/60/90
seconds within Uconnect Settings Ú page 144.
To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the head-
light switch to the AUTO position to turn off the
parking lights.
HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this
customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is on. This feature is
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 144.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the instrument panel lights will auto-
matically dim to the lower nighttime intensity.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ADAPTIVE BI-XENON HIGH INTENSITY
D
ISCHARGE HEADLIGHTS —
I
F EQUIPPED
This system automatically swivels the headlight
beam pattern horizontally to provide increased
illumination in the direction the vehicle is being
steered.
NOTE:
Each time the Adaptive Headlight system is
turned on, the headlights will initialize by
performing a brief sequence of rotations.
The Adaptive Headlight system is active only
when the vehicle is moving forward.
The Adaptive Headlight system can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 144.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up
to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position while the
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight
switch is cycled off within 45 seconds.
Headlight delay can be cancelled by either
turning the headlight switch on then off, or by
placing the ignition in the ON position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system Ú page 144.
If you turn the headlights off before the igni-
tion, they will turn off in the normal manner.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after
the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a
chime will sound to alert the driver when the
driver's door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the
headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the headlight switch. To turn off the front
fog lights, either push the headlight switch a
second time or turn off the headlight switch.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However,
selecting the high beam headlights will turn off
the fog lights.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash,
or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb.
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and a continuous
chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior lights come on when a door is
opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn
off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are
on because a door is open. The Battery
Protection also includes the glove compartment
light and the trunk light. To restore interior light
operation after automatic battery protection is
enabled (lights off), either place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position, or cycle the light switch.
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing
the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off,
push the lens a second time.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in
the overhead console.
Front Map/Reading Lights
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch
on either side of the console. These buttons are
backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights
off, push the switch a second time. The lights
will also turn on when the unlock button on the
key fob is pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an
ambient light feature. This light casts
illumination for improved visibility of the floor
and center console area.
Ambient Light
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the door handle lights, map
pocket lights, and ambient light located in the
overhead console.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
(Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
Dimmer Controls
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting
and lighted cupholders (if equipped) can be
regulated by rotating the left dimmer control up
(brighter) or down (dimmer). When the
headlights are on you can supplement the
brightness of the instrument cluster display,
radio and overhead console by rotating the
control to the first detent up until you hear a
click. This feature is called “Parade” mode and
is useful when headlights are required during
the day. Rotating the dimmer control up to the
second detent, the furthest position up, turns
on the courtesy lights. This feature is known as
“Dome On”.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control (Vehicles Sold In
Canada Only)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the multifunction lever on the left
side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the
end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
first detent, past the intermittent settings for
low-speed wiper operation, or to the second
detent past the intermittent settings for
high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Intermittent Wipers
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
first detent position, and then turn the end of
the lever to select the desired delay interval.
There are four delay settings, which allow you to
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of
one cycle every second to a maximum of
approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The
delay intervals will double in duration when the
vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever
inward (toward the steering wheel) and hold. If
the lever is pushed while in the intermittent
setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for
two cycles after the end of the lever is released,
and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers
are in the off position, the wipers will operate for
three wipe cycles and then turn off.
Mist
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the
MIST position and release for a single wiping
cycle. The wipers will continue to operate until
you release the multifunction lever
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 240.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction
lever to one of four detent positions to activate
this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay
position one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay detent position four is the most sensitive.
Wiper delay position three should be used for
normal rain conditions.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to
the windshield wipers may result if the
wiper control is left in any position other
than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine.
If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the wind-
shield wiper control is turned off and the
blades cannot return to the off position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 144.
The Rain Sensing system has protection
features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When
the ignition is ON, and the automatic trans-
mission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL posi-
tion.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Automatic Climate Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output of
air. The MAX A/C indicator illuminates
when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again
will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit. In MAX
A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to the desired user settings. Pressing
other settings will cancel MAX A/C.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate, to change the system
between recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
illuminates when Recirculation is on.
Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used
in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
Auto Button
Set your desired temperature and
press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and
maintain your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower
speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly
recommended for efficiency.
You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen.
Push the button on the faceplate.
Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual mode and automatic
mode Ú page 56.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to change the current
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front
Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield
and side window demist outlets. When the
defrost button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging. When
toggling the front defrost mode button, the
Climate Control system will return to the
previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
NOTE:
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing
solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger’s temperature setting
while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount
of air forced through the climate
control system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting
the blower will cause automatic mode to switch
to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on
the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the
blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as
you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the
Mode buttons on the touchscreen to
change the airflow distribution mode.
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and
demist outlets.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through
the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on
the touchscreen, or push the OFF
button on the faceplate to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
press and release the AUTO button on the
touchscreen on the Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
NOTE:
It is not necessary to change the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 144.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of
the following commands:
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to
70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used
to adjust the interior temperature of your
vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust
the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate
Control system when the vehicle is being stored
for an extended period of time, see
Ú page 283.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to (Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control
to the (Panel
Mode) position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode)
position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to Mix Mode) and
turn on (A/C) to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the (Floor Mode)
position. If windshield
fogging starts to
occur, move the
control to the (Mix
Mode) position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Glove Compartment
Cubby Bin
There is a cubby bin located forward of the gear
selector. The cubby bin is covered with a
push-push actuated door. Push inward on the
door to open it; push the door a second time to
close it.
Cubby Bin
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Console Features
Two separate storage compartments are
located underneath the center console armrest.
Center Console
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving
with the glove compartment open may result
in injury in a collision.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Inside the center console armrest, there is a
removable upper storage tray that can be slid
forward/rearward on rails for access to the
lower storage area. This tray has an integrated
coin holder, along with additional area for small
items and handheld devices. Below the upper
tray, the lower storage compartment is made for
larger items. In addition, the 12 Volt power
outlet, USB, and AUX jack are located here.
Upper Storage Tray
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
For rear passengers, there is a storage bin
located in the armrest. Lift upward on the latch
to open the storage compartment.
Rear Armrest Storage
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a
push-push design. Push the chrome pad on the
door to open. Push the chrome pad on the door
to close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
USB/AUX C ONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information,
refer to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in
the Owner’s Manual Supplement.
AUX/USB Ports
Located on the rear of the front center console
are dual USB “Charge Only” ports. The USB
“Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
Rear USB Charging Ports
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are
equipped with a light ring that illuminates the
cupholders for the front passengers.
Light Ring In Front Cupholder
The rear cupholders may also be equipped with
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for
the rear passengers. The light ring is controlled
by the Dimmer Control Ú page 50.
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
1 — USB 1 Port
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB 2 Port
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED AND COOLED CUPHOLDERS —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and
cooled cupholders. The cupholders are
designed to help keep warm beverages warm
and cool beverages cool.
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
Push the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the
cupholder. Push the symbol a second time to
turn the cupholder off. Push the “Hot” symbol
once to activate the cupholder. Push the symbol
a second time to turn off the cupholder.
POWER SUNSHADE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power
sunshade that will reduce the amount of
sunlight that will shine through the rear
windshield.
The power sunshade can be operated using the
Uconnect system Ú page 144.
Press the “Controls” button and then press the
“Rear Sunshade” button to raise the power
sunscreen. Press the “Rear Sunshade” button a
second time to lower the sunshade.
If the sunshade is in the raised position and the
vehicle is placed in REVERSE, the sunshade will
automatically fully lower. When the
transmission is shifted out of REVERSE the
sunshade will automatically return to the fully
raised position after a brief delay.
The power sunshade can also be operated by
passengers in the rear seats. The power
sunshade switch is located on the back of the
center console between the heated seat
switches. Push the switch once to raise the
sunshade. Push the switch a second time to
lower the sunshade.
Power Sunshade Switch Behind Center Console
WARNING!
When using the cupholder in the “Hot”
position, avoid contact with the heated
portion of the cupholder in order to reduce
the possibility of burns. Persons who are
unable to feel pain to the skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical condition must
exercise particular care in order to prevent
serious burn injury. Keep the cupholder free
of debris or stray objects when operated in
the “Hot” position.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
NOTE:
The rear sunshade control switch can be locked
out along with the rear passenger window
controls from the driver switch window lockout
switch.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13
Amp) power outlet on the instrument panel and
one 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet in the center
console that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are
powered when the ignition switch is in the ACC
or ON/RUN position, while the outlets labeled
with a “battery” are connected directly to the
battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or turned
off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
The front power outlet is located inside the
storage area on the center stack of the
instrument panel.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is
also a power outlet located in the storage area
of the center console.
Center Console Power Outlet
NOTE:
If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the
maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the
center console power outlet. When the Media
Hub is not in use, the outlet can deliver up to
120 Watts (10 Amps). If the power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin
located on the center console on vehicles not
equipped with the ash receiver tray. A fire
leading to bodily injury could result.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
The instrument panel power outlet and dual
rear console USB ports can be changed to
“battery” powered at all times by moving the
#12 20 Amp fuse from “IGN” to “B+”. These
fuses are located in the fuse box in the trunk,
below the load floor.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel
Power Outlet/Dual USB Charge Only Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Center Console
Power Outlet/Media Hub
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of acces-
sory or accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control
all the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be
operated by using the single window controls on
the passenger door trim panel. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The timing is program-
mable within Uconnect Settings Ú page 144.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power
window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Pull the window switch up to the second detent
and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power
windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the windows while operating
the power window switches. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during
auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly
and hold to close the window manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold the
switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the
second detent to open the window
completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
trim panel allows you to disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors. To
disable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button (the indicator light
on the button will turn on). To enable the
window controls, push and release the window
lockout button again (the indicator light on the
button will turn off).
Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The Panoramic sunroof switch is located to the
left between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
The power shade switch is located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any other movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
in the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially
opened position until the switch is operated and
held again.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the "Vent" button within
one-half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position.
During Express Vent operation, any movement
of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will auto-
matically cycle to the halfway open position prior
to the sunroof opening to the Vent position.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
S
HADE
Express Open/Close
Push the shade switch rearward and release it
within one-half second and the shade will
automatically open to the halfway position and
stop automatically. Push the switch again to
fully open the shade.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will close
automatically from any position.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any other movement of the shade
switch will stop the shade.
Manual Open/Close
To open the shade, push and hold the switch
rearward. The shade will open and stop
automatically at the half-open position. Push
and hold the switch again and the shade will
fully open.
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in
the forward position.
Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a
partially closed condition until the switch is
pushed again.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch can remain active in
Accessory Delay for up to approximately
10 minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is placed
to the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
This feature is programmable using the
Uconnect system Ú page 144.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be
released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Reach under the hood, move the safety
latch to the left, and lift the hood.
Hood Safety Latch
CLOSING THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from
the point where the props no longer hold the
hood open.
TRUNK
OPENING THE TRUNK
The trunk may be opened in several ways:
Power trunk release button on the instru-
ment panel
Trunk button on the key fob
Trunk Passive Entry button Ú page 22
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
trunk open symbol will display in the instrument
cluster indicating that the trunk is open. The
odometer display will reappear once the trunk is
closed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
With the ignition in the OFF position, the trunk
open symbol will display until the trunk is
closed.
Power Trunk Release Button
The trunk can be opened from inside
the vehicle using the power trunk
release button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
NOTE:
The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
Key Fob Trunk Release Button
Push the power trunk button on the
key fob twice within five seconds to
release the trunk.
Passive Entry Button
Push the trunk passive entry button which is
located on the right side of the trunk lid. With a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the trunk, push the passive entry button to open
the trunk.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
CLOSING THE TRUNK
With one or more hands placed on the outside
trunk surface push the trunk lid down until you
hear the trunk lock latch into place.
NOTE:
Before closing the trunk lid make sure your key
fob isn’t inside the trunk area. The trunk will
latch then automatically unlock if the key fob is
sensed, not allowing the key fob to be locked in
the trunk area.
TRUNK SAFETY
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal
emergency release lever is built into the trunk
latching mechanism. In the event of an
individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be opened by actuating the
glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk
latching mechanism.
Trunk Emergency Release
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
(Continued)
CARGO AREA FEATURES
60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat —
If Equipped
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides
cargo-carrying versatility. The seatbacks fold
down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the
seatbacks and the bolsters. When the seats are
folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright
position, make sure it is latched by strongly
pulling on the top of the seatback above the
seat strap.
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the
trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from
outside, or through the inside of the vehicle.
Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is
unattended. Once in the trunk, young children
may not be able to escape, even if they
entered through the rear seat. If trapped in
the trunk, children can die from suffocation
or heat stroke.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position, the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle
(with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or
folded down position) should not be used
as a play area by children at any time. They
could be seriously injured in a collision.
Children should be seated and using the
proper restraint system.
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the
rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is
intended for load carrying purposes only,
not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow
these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo
floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far
forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of
the rear axle. Too much weight or improp-
erly placed weight over or behind the rear
axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to
sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visi-
bility or become a dangerous projectile in a
sudden stop or collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Trunk Mat — If Equipped
A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo
area. The trunk mat is used to protect the
interior of the trunk from mud, snow, and
debris.
Grocery Bag Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery
bag hooks, located on either side of the rear
cargo area.
Grocery Bag Hooks
Cargo Net — If Equipped
The rear cargo area may be equipped with a
cargo net to keep items secure while driving.
Rear Cargo Net
Attachment
To attach the cargo net, the clips must be
hooked through the loops on both sides of the
cargo area.
Cargo Net Attachments
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a
level-riding vehicle under most passenger and
cargo loading conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock
absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the
correct height. It takes approximately 1 mile
(1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to complete
depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately
15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down.
The vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit
50 lbs (22 kg) of the grocery bag hook.
Damage may occur to hook and mounting
surface.
1 — Top Attachment
2 — Bottom Attachment
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
73
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster For 3.6L Engine
3
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster For 5.7L Engine
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 75.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed
to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
NOTE:
The warning / indicator Lights will briefly illumi-
nate for a bulb check when the ignition is first
cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information
to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the
display for viewing, and display the total miles,
or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display
located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. It is recommended to call
an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
3
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features an
interactive display which is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to
select a variety of useful information by pushing
the arrow buttons located on the left side of the
steering wheel. The instrument cluster display
menu items consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrow buttons
allows you to cycle through the Main Menu
Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allows
you to cycle through the submenu items of the
Main menu item.
NOTE:
Holding the up / down or left / right
arrow button will loop the user through the
currently selected menu or options
presented on the screen.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last
submenu screen viewed within that main
menu will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or
km/h).
For Screen Setup:
OK button allows user to enter menu and
submenus.
Within each submenu layer, the up and
down arrow buttons will allow the user to
select the item of interest.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
Pushing the OK button makes the selection.
A confirmation screen will appear, returning
the user to the first page of the submenu.
Pushing the left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus:
Information is reset by pushing and holding
the OK button.
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the
instrument cluster display for five seconds after
a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the OK or arrow
buttons. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled
maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster
display controls for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu
to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life.
If conditions are met, the gauge and
numeric display will update to show 100%.
If conditions are not met a pop-up message
of "To reset oil life engine must be off with
ignition in run" will be displayed (for five
seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil
Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down
arrow button to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return
the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
3
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
S
ELECTABLE MENU ITEMS
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the desired Selectable Menu item is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as
desired.
Speedometer
Push and release the OK button to toggle
between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
The Vehicle Info consists of the following
submenu (pushing the left or right arrow
button will allow you to scroll through the
submenu):
Tire Pressure Monitor
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
AWD Status — If Equipped
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu provides the status and
visuals about the Adaptive Cruise Control and
LaneSense features. When they are both off the
screen, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) and LaneSense Off."
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature —
If Equipped Ú page 109
The instrument cluster display displays the
current ACC system settings. The information
displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the
steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display
in the instrument cluster display:
ACC Set
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
LaneSense — If Equipped Ú page 127
The instrument cluster display displays the
current LaneSense system settings. The
information displayed depends on LaneSense
system status. Push the LaneSense button
(located on the center stack below the
Uconnect display) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
LaneSense Off
When LaneSense is deactivated, the display
will read “LaneSense Off.”
LaneSense On
When LaneSense is activated, the display will
read “LaneSense On.”
Fuel Economy
The Fuel Economy Menu has two submenu
pages; one with Current Value (instantaneous
calculation of the fuel economy) displayed and
one without the Current Value displayed (toggle
the left or right arrow button to select
one):
Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or
km/L).
Range To Empty (miles or km).
Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or
km/L).
Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an
amber color and turn green as Fuel Economy
improves.
Hold the OK button to reset average fuel
economy information.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip Menu item is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Toggle the left
or right arrow button to select Trip A or
Trip B. The Trip information will display the
following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or
km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last
reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG, L/100km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time
of travel since the last reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
This menu displays the Audio information of the
currently playing audio source (e.g. FM radio).
Messages
This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages, if any. Pushing the left or
right arrow button will allow you to scroll
through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the OK button to enter the submenus.
The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
NOTE:
Screen Setup is available only when the vehicle
is not in motion.
3
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Upper Left
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
None
2. Upper Right
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
None
3. Center
Menu Title
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio Information
Digital Speed
None
4. Current Gear
On
Off
5. Odometer
Show
Hide
6. Fuel Gauge
Standard
Detailed
7. Restore Default
OK
Cancel
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system Ú page 83.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel —
If Equipped
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of the charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior
and interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports) during
certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
3
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB
ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips
and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving
pattern did not help to identify the cause.
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view or change the following settings. Push the
up or down arrow button to scroll through
the main menus, then push the right arrow
button to scroll through the submenus of each
menu item. Push the left arrow button to
scroll back to a previous menu or submenu.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
in all cases. Always refer to the information in
this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active warning lights will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment
options and current vehicle status. Some
warning lights are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 176.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
3
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steering (EPS) system Ú page 106.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the nature
of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
the transmission is placed in the PARK position.
The light should turn off. If the light remains on
with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool, whichever comes first.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning
(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle.
If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service Ú page 222.
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
trunk is open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
Vehicle Security system is arming,
and then will flash slowly until the
vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is
not operating and needs service
Ú page 109.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
3
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the Electronic Stability Control system
is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC
is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the LaneSense system is not
operating and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque
warnings when the vehicle starts to
drift out of its lane unintentionally
without the use of a turn signal.
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white/green to flashing
yellow Ú page 127.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 1.9 gal (7.13 L), this
light will turn on and a single chime
will sound.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 234.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will turn on to
indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD)
system is not functioning properly and
that service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward
Collision Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service
Ú page 170.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a
low tire pressure warning light when one or
more of your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure warning light.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure warning light. When the system
detects a malfunction, the warning light will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction warning light after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision
Warning is off Ú page 170.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display the distance setting
for the ACC system when the system
is engaged Ú page 109.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 109.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is set to the
desired speed Ú page 107.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on
Ú page 45.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid green when both
lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 127.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on Ú page 45.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport
Mode is active.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ECO Mode
is active.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
— If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC has
been turned on, but is not set
Ú page 109.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is ready, but
not set Ú page 107.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON,
but not armed, the LaneSense
indicator light illuminates solid white.
This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single
lane line is detected, the system is ready to
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
Ú page 127.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 143.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a dead
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
3
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
93
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the PARK position
before you can start the engine. Apply the
brakes before shifting into any driving gear.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long
as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key
fob is in the passenger compartment.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in OFF mode, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition (of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after 10
seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC mode until
the gear selector is in PARK and the button
is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h),
the engine will shut off and the ignition will
remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed
drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle
will AutoPark Ú page 95.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
modes without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the
situations on the following pages occur. It is a
back up system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector and
an eight speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC Mode.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and near the gear selector. If the “P” indi-
cator is blinking, your vehicle is not in
PARK. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector and
an eight speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these
cases, the gear selector must be returned to “P”
to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h).
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the “P” in the
instrument cluster display and near the gear
selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” or “Cold
Weather Operation” procedure, it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine
for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear
any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Leave the ignition key in the RUN position,
release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has
a removable cap that is located near the air box.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
drivetrain (engine, transmission, and rear axle)
in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle
lubricant installed at the factory are high-quality
and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant
changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate and conditions under which vehicle
operations will occur. For the recommended
viscosity and quality grades Ú page 291.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 218.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as an indica-
tion of difficulty. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in
period. Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied and place the gear
selector in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located
below the lower left corner of the instrument
panel. To apply the parking brake, firmly push
the parking brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the parking brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the
brake disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake
pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the center
console. The transmission gear range (PRNDL/S)
is displayed both above the gear selector and in
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
simply rotate the gear selector. To access the L or
S position, push down on the gear selector and
then rotate it. You must also press the brake
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or
NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving
at low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges
at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate
the gear selector to the appropriate detent.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within
a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
Standard Gear Selector
The standard transmission gear selector has
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW
shift positions. Using the LOW position manually
downshifts the transmission to a lower gear
based on vehicle speed.
Premium Gear Selector
Premium Gear Selector With AutoStick
The premium transmission gear selector
provides PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE,
and SPORT shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control (shift
paddles mounted on the steering wheel).
Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the
DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select
the transmission gear, and will display the
current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3,
etc Ú page 104.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position, and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics
under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use
the AutoStick shift control (if equipped) to select a
lower gear
Ú
page 104. Under these conditions,
using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For “Recreational Towing” Ú page 140
For “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” Ú page 225
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
SPORT (S) — If Equipped
This mode alters the transmission's automatic
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift
speeds are increased to make full use of
available engine power.
To access SPORT mode, push down on the gear
selector and rotate it fully clockwise, or push the
SPORT button in the center stack.
LOW (L) — If Equipped
Use this range for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, the
transmission will downshift for increased
engine braking. To access the LOW position,
push down on the gear selector and rotate it
fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears,
or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may
be severely degraded and the engine may stall.
In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what
actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
This system can also provide you with more
control during passing, city driving, cold slippery
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
many other situations.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT
mode, it will operate automatically, shifting
between the eight available gears. To engage
AutoStick, simply tap one of the steering
wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in
DRIVE or SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this will
activate a temporary AutoStick mode. The
transmission will revert back to normal
operation after a period of time, depending on
accelerator pedal activity. When the
transmission gear selector is in the SPORT
position, tapping either shift paddle will activate
"permanent" AutoStick mode. The transmission
will remain in AutoStick mode until the driver
deliberately disables AutoStick (as described
below). Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick will
downshift the transmission to the next lower
gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick will
retain the current gear. When AutoStick is
active, the current transmission gear is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Paddle Shifters
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up
or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the
driver, unless an engine lugging or overspeed
condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift
is chosen, except as described below.
If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode,
the transmission will automatically shift up
when maximum engine speed is reached. If
the accelerator is fully pressed, the transmis-
sion will downshift when possible (based on
current vehicle speed and gear). Lack of accel-
erator pedal activity will cause the transmis-
sion to revert to automatic operation.
If AutoStick is engaged while the transmis-
sion gear selector is in the SPORT position,
manual gear selection will be maintained
until the gear selector is returned to DRIVE, or
as described below. The transmission will not
upshift automatically at redline in this mode,
nor will downshifts be obtained if the acceler-
ator pedal is pressed to the floor.
In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmis-
sion will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and
will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop.
After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow
starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in
SECOND gear can be helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
1 — Shift Paddle Downshift
2 — Shift Paddle Upshift
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
Holding the (-) paddle pressed will downshift
the transmission to the lowest gear possible
at the current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold
the (+) shift paddle until "D" or "S" is once again
indicated in the instrument cluster. Shifting out
of SPORT mode will also disable AutoStick. You
can shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
SPORT Mode Button
If your vehicle is equipped with SPORT mode,
this mode is a configuration set up for typical
enthusiast driving. The engine, transmission
and steering systems are all set to their SPORT
settings. SPORT mode will provide improved
throttle response and modified shifting for an
enhanced driving experience, as well the
greatest amount of steering feel. This mode
may be activated and deactivated by pushing
the SPORT button on the instrument panel
switch bank.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The
system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The Electric Power Steering system will give you
good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will
vary its assist to provide light efforts while
parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still
have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be
selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 144.
If the Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light is displayed and the
“SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the
“POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within
the instrument cluster display, this indicates the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service Ú page 82.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
If the Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light is
displayed and the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM
OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, they indicate that
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred
which caused an over temperature condition in the
power steering system. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light and message turn off.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control for cruising at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining
a set distance between you and the vehicle
ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to
automatically adjust the preset speed.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC
distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control system takes
over accelerator operations at speeds greater
than 25 mph (40 km/h), or 20 mph (32 km/h)
depending on engine size and axle ratio.
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple speed control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accelerate
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decelerate
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear
in the instrument cluster display to indicate the
Cruise Control is on. To turn the system off,
push the on/off button a second time. “CRUISE
CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is
off. The system should be turned off when not
in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push and
release the SET (+) or SET (-) button. Release
the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at
the selected speed. Once a speed has been set,
a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h)” will appear indicating the set speed. A
cruise indicator lamp, along with set speed will
also appear and stay on in the instrument
cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you are not using it.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a
greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may
be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate
the Cruise Control system without erasing the
set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by Cruise Control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. The
Cruise Control function performs differently
Ú page 107.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your Cruise
Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the perfor-
mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and
Forward Collision Warning systems.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control alone (an ACC
distance not set) will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the
mode selected Ú page 298.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for
active driver involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera-
tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following the vehicle in front and
hold the vehicle for two seconds in the
stop position. If the vehicle in front does
not start moving within two seconds the
ACC system will display a message that
the system will release the brakes and
that the brakes must be applied manu-
ally. An audible chime will sound when
the brakes are released.
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
tion zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering
wheel operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC on/off button until one of the
following appears in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is
pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Setting Decrease
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Setting Increase
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle speed is below the
minimum speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
your vehicle in close proximity
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
an ACC distance set. To change between the
different modes, push the ACC on/off button
which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be the current speed of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning
does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle
ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while an ACC distance is also set, the
system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated)
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed
Cruise Control is being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new
set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
new set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button
or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
When An ACC Distance Is Also Set:
NOTE:
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a
full stop when following a vehicle in front.
When you have ACC active and follow a
vehicle in front to a standstill, after two
seconds you will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator
pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set
speed.
The ACC will bring the vehicle to a complete
stop while following a vehicle in front and
hold the vehicle for two seconds in the stop
position. If the vehicle in front does not start
moving within two seconds, the ACC system
will display a message that the system will
release the brakes and that the brakes must
be applied manually. An audible chime will
sound when the brakes are released.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Decrease button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
instrument cluster display will show the ACC Set
With Target Detected Indicator Light, and the
system will adjust the vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting,
regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages Ú page 112.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration
is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
signal (Lane Change Assist feature included)
and will only be active when passing on the left
hand side. Switching lanes will not impact the
ACC system if the driver is already traveling at
the set speed.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your
vehicle to a standstill while following the vehicle
in front, your vehicle will resume motion without
any driver interaction if the vehicle in front
starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message
will display on the instrument cluster display
and produce a warning chime. Driver
intervention will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or
the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop
system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument
cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this
moment.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster will display the
above message and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice
and snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The
ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be careful
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at an autho-
rized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and also
a chime will indicate when conditions
temporarily limit system performance. This
most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded
due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at an authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system fault
or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC
again later, following an ignition cycle. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
stay alert and may need to intervene. The
following are examples of these types of
situations:
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not recommended when
using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
The driver must maintain control of the vehicle,
remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if
needed.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
NOTE:
The driver must maintain control of the vehicle,
remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if
needed.
ACC Hill Example
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not
yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for
the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear and/or front fascia/bumper
and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward (e.g. during a parking
maneuver).
For limitations of this system and
recommendations, see Ú page 125.
ParkSense will retain the system state (enabled
or disabled) from the previous ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense
is enabled at one of these gear selector
positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The
system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. These distances depend on the
location, type, and orientation of the obstacle in
the horizontal direction.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/
bumper. These distances depend on the
location, type, and orientation of the obstacle in
the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE,
or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle
has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc in
the center rear region and will produce a
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
tone will change from slow, to fast, to
continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region
and will produce a fast sound tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front
region, the display will show a single arc in the
center front region. As the vehicle moves closer
to the obstacle, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast sound
tone will be produced when reaching the
second flashing arc and will change to a
continuous tone when the first flashing arc
appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
front region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right front region
and will produce a fast tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle
and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following charts
show the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio
tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is
applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected in the Uconnect system Ú page 144.
The chime volume settings include low,
medium, and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
within the Uconnect system Ú page 144.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 75. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/
or front fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and
disabled with the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed
to disable the system, the instrument cluster
will display the “ParkSense Off” message for
approximately five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the instrument cluster will display the
“ParkSense Off” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily
and then the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message
for five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will display a "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up message for five
seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic
will be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either
the front or rear sensor location depending on
where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is
functioning properly. These arc alerts will
interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if
an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep
the ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
When you turn ParkSense off, the instru-
ment cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle
the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster will display “PARK-
SENSE OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia/
bumper when the loudspeaker sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape,
giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides a haptic warning in the form of torque
applied to the steering wheel to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane boundaries. If the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane, the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver unintentionally drifts across the
lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides visual warnings
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
audible warning to the driver if removed. The
system will cancel if the driver does not return
their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on
the center stack below the Uconnect
display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A
“LaneSense On” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on). A
“LaneSense Off” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state, on or off, from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/
RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the left
lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
yellow (on/off), the left thin line remains solid
yellow and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing
Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-
ture occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and left
thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense tell-
tale changes from solid green to solid yellow.
At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example, if approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Drift With Solid Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
yellow (on/off) and the left thin line remains
solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in
the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example, if approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing
Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/med/late) that
you can configure through the Uconnect system
Ú page 144.
NOTE:
When enabled, the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with the use of the
turn signal.
The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward
Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio display screen along with
a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds
this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn
the Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 144.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera
Delay feature and it is turned on, the rear
camera image will be displayed for up to 10
seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE. However, this feature is canceled if
the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
PARK, the vehicle's ignition is placed in the OFF
position, or the user presses the image defeat
“X” button.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera Delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the last touchscreen
appears again.
When manually activated, a counter will be
initiated after the vehicle speed is above 8 mph
(13 km/h). The rear view camera image will turn
off when this counter reaches 10 seconds. The
counter will be reset when the vehicle speed is
8 mph (13 km/h) or below. If the vehicle speed
remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the rear view
camera image will continue to be displayed until
the transmission is shifted into PARK, the
vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position,
or the image defeat “X” button is pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position. Different colored zones
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch
(located in the driver's door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Location
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly
push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup
and re-release the fuel door using the inside
release button. Do not pry on the door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seal the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe
– the nozzle opens and holds the flapper
doors while refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is
full.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for five seconds to
allow nozzle to drain.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
NOTE:
A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper doors to
allow for emergency refueling with a gas can.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
It is recommended that the driver look
frequently over his/her shoulder when
backing up, especially in sunny weather
conditions, since there may be a glare from
the sun at certain angles that can make the
image on the touchscreen difficult to see.
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
EMERGENCY FUEL FILLER DOOR
R
ELEASE
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use
the fuel filler door emergency release located in
the trunk.
Follow the steps below to open the fuel door in
case of an emergency:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the
left side inner trim panel).
Access Cover
3. Pull the release cable.
Release Cable
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is
shown on the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This
information should be used for passenger and
luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label
affixed to the drivers side B-pillar or the rear of
the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of vehicle
Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read
the VIN.
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and
cargo. The total load must be limited so that you
do not exceed the GVWR.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
OVERLOADING
The load carrying components (axle, springs,
tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide
satisfactory service as long as you do not
exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of
your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded
and ready for operation. Weigh it on a
commercial scale to ensure that it is not over
the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle separately. It is important that you
distribute the load evenly over the front and rear
axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards
and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or
suspension components do not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
LOADING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its
empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side.
Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible.
Stow all loose items securely before driving. If
weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load
is within the specified GVWR, you must
redistribute the weight. Improper weight
distribution can have an adverse effect on the
way your vehicle steers and handles and the
way the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it
is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label”
affixed to the rear of the driver's door for your
vehicle's GVWR and GAWRs Ú page 132.
Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle's
proper tire pressure.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 133.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables, and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in
combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 133.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force
exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
Trailer Sway Control
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) can be a
mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying
motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most
popular on the market today and they are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you
in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced
on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard Ú page 263.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lbs (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) Max. Tongue Weight (See Note)
3.6L Automatic 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in
the trailer and will not shift during travel.
When trailering cargo that is not fully
secured, dynamic load shifts can occur
that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
Max loading as defined on the “Tire and
Loading Information” placard.
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perform the maintenance listed in the
“Scheduled Servicing” Ú page 228. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or
GCWR ratings.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
For the proper tire replacement procedures.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 263.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect after clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control (if equipped)
to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
This action will also provide better engine
braking.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate
performance and avoids frequent down-
shifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce
vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
ground, or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED.
The only acceptable method for towing this
vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle
trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe
controlled launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference
in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is
possible for a wedge of water to build up
between the tire and road surface. This is
known as hydroplaning and may cause partial
or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following
precautions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the
roads are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid
a collision in a sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited
Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does
not eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a
given axle for improved handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause
sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
4
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider the
following Warnings and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing
water before driving through it. Never drive
through standing water that is deeper than
the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
driving through standing water. This will
minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
143
(Continued)
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
system, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability
and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or an authorized dealer may
contact you directly regarding software
updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety related
systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into your
vehicle if it came from a trusted source.
Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed
in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility
for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 MULTIMEDIA
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data
Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” Ú page 91.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
— U
CONNECT 4C/4C NAV S ETTINGS
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons
On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this menu, the
Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired menu, press and release
the preferred setting “option” until a check
mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is
complete, press the X button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle
up or down through the available settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be
found within the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio,
along with the selectable options pertaining to
each setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
MULTIMEDIA 145
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system
will display in the chosen language.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of
the touchscreen. The available settings are:
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The
available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the
system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system
automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will
allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
5
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 MULTIMEDIA
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting will allow you to set the Control Screen to turn off
automatically after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of
measurement independently.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
MULTIMEDIA 147
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition
system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from
the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description
from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the command list on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the command list. The “With Help” setting will
show the command list and provide a brief description of what the
command does. The “Never” setting will turn the command list off.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The
system will control the time via the GPS location.
Time Format
This setting will allow you set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
5
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out
of reverse.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the active backup camera guidelines on or off.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
MULTIMEDIA 149
Safety & Driving Assistance
When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings.
These options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To
access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW
system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is
detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the
object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The
“Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting
will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The
“Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and
apply brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Active Braking
This setting will activate Forward Collision Warning Active Braking. The
available options are “On” and “Off”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
5
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot
Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the
outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights
on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Electric Power Steering Default
This setting will adjust the power steering modes. Setting options are
“Normal”, “Sport”, and “Comfort”.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is place in REVERSE.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse
This Setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE.
Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights with Wipers
This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
MULTIMEDIA 151
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available
settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings
are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when
the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and
“Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
5
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when
the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. Available settings are “On” and
“Off”.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the
key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button
is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the
Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from
the key fob.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key
fob are needed to open all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only
unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors on the first push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter-N-Go) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that
have been linked to the key fob.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
MULTIMEDIA 153
Seats & Comfort — If Equipped
When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote
start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off. These settings will only
activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats (if
equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the
comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine
is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount
of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
5
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set
audio location.
Equalizer
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the
audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher
setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The
available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through
the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected
device.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
MULTIMEDIA 155
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The following
settings are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom,
default), and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
5
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel
list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM®
Travel Link is a separate subscription.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
MULTIMEDIA 157
Restore Settings
When the Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its
default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
System Information — If Equipped
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all
personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and
presets.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
5
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio Ú page 298.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
159
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop).
Brake pedal pulsations.
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop.
The ABS is designed to function with the
Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning
and that service is required. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light does not come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction
Control System (TCS). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Rain
Brake Support (RBS), and Ready Alert Braking
(RAB).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the Brake
System Warning Light does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results
in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to
avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear
axle from entering the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). See Ú page 161 in this
section for a complete explanation of the avail-
able ESC modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the above
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to
flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
(Continued)
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes,
the push and release of the button will toggle
the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be
required to return to "ESC On" mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
If Equipped — "ESC Sport" and "ESC Track"
are ESC “Partial Off” mode(s).
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on any
public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
mode, push and hold the ESC OFF button for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with
the engine running. After five seconds, a chime
will sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will
display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON position. It should
go out with the engine running. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section) has
been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
reduced.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only.
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavail-
able. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is
only intended for off-highway or off-road use.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
the customer has elected to have the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the ESC system will be on even if it
was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For
vehicles equipped with a manual transmis-
sion, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain
active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
(Continued)
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting using Uconnect
Settings, see Ú page 144 for further
information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water
buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions
when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When RBS is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver
interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking
situation may occur by monitoring how fast the
throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic
Brake Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected,
the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power
to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similarly to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will
apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If so,
there may not be enough brake pressure to
hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill
when the brake pedal is released. In order to
avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer
brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors,
located inside the rear fascia/bumper, to detect
highway licensable vehicles (automobiles,
trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind
spot zones from the rear/front/side of the
vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning
Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rearview mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of
the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in the BSM warning light randomly
alerting on the trailer or even remaining illu-
minated the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear Ú page 144.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps
when a motorcycle or any small object
remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple
of seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow,
ice, mud, or other road contaminations
accumulate on the rear fascia/bumper where the
radar sensors are located. The system may also
detect blockage if the vehicle is operated in areas
with extremely low radar returns such as a desert
or parallel to a large elevation drop. If blockage is
detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable,
Wipe Rear Corners” message will display in the
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
cluster, both mirror lights will illuminate, and
BSM and RCP alerts will not occur. This is normal
operation. The system will automatically recover
and resume function when the condition clears.
To minimize system blockage, do not block the
area of the rear fascia/bumper where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper
stickers, bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of
road contaminations.
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume if the
corresponding turn signal is activated
Ú page 169.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 31 mph
(50 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 298.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP) Detection —
If Equipped
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing
out of parking spaces where their vision of
oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space
until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The
RCP system will then have a clear view of the
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE,
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehi-
cles, the system will not be able to alert the driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
backup aid system. It is intended to be used
to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in
a parking lot situation. Drivers must be
careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION OPERATION — IF
E
QUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors, as well as the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system, to calculate the
probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with
audible and visual warnings and may provide a
brake jerk warning. If the driver does not take
action based upon these progressive warnings,
then the system will provide a limited level of
active braking to help slow the vehicle and miti-
gate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the
system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not
applied sufficient brake force, the system will
compensate and provide additional brake force
as required. If a Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event begins at a speed below
20 mph (32 km/h), the system may provide the
maximum or partial braking to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Colli-
sion Warning with Mitigation event stops the
vehicle completely, the system will hold the
vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated
Ú page 298.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within an ignition cycle,
the Active Braking portion of FCW will be
deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings due to the surroundings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is on; this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front of you.
The Forward Collision activation/deactivation is
located in "Uconnect Settings" under "Safety
And Driving Assistance". Forward Collision can
be checked or unchecked.
When FCW is selected off, there will be an "FCW
OFF" icon that appears in the instrument cluster
display.
Changing the FCW status to off prevents the
system from warning you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you.
NOTE:
The FCW system’s default state is on. The FCW
system state is kept in memory from one igni-
tion cycle to the next. If the system is turned off,
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking settings
are programmable through the Uconnect
system Ú page 144.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting
and the Active Braking is set to “on”; this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are
farther away and it applies limited braking. This
gives you the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,
allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are much closer. This setting provides less
reaction time than the “Far” setting, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut
down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rate of speed.
FCW disables in the same manner as ACC,
and will display a screen indicating that the
feature is unavailable when it has been
disabled.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/
FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its
full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase
as the vehicle is driven — this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
See Ú page 263 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or
above the recommended cold placard pressure.
Once the low tire pressure warning (TPMS
Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard
pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to
turn off. The system will automatically update
and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS
Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi
(186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
(Continued)
be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module
Ú page 298.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver module.
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors.
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS
sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light will illuminate
in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in
one or more of the four active road tires. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display an
“Inflate to XX” message and a graphic showing
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values shown in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those shown in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the instrument
cluster will change color back to the original
color, and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
Service Tire Pressure System Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "Service Tire Pressure System"
message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the
"Service Tire Pressure System" message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display
in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices
or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
Accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size does not have a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching
full size spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition key
cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain
on and a chime will sound. In addition, the
graphic in the instrument cluster will still
display a different color pressure value and
an "Inflate to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display
a “Service Tire Pressure System” message
for five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster
will display a “Service Tire Pressure System”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare or non-matching full
size, the TPMS will update automatically. In
addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn
off and the graphic in the instrument cluster
will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors,
such as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle
for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the
“Service Tire Pressure System” message and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “Service Tire
Pressure System” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then turn off. The instrument
cluster will display the “Service Tire Pressure
System” message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "Service Tire Pressure System"
message will no longer be displayed as long as
no system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
in the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position Ú page 193.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 193.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see Ú page 294 for customer
service contact information.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
(Continued)
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
(Continued)
(Continued)
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt
Extender when the lap belt is not long
enough and only use in the recommended
seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
(Continued)
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 202.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 82.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the Side Air Bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the
key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
in the engine compartment and on the ground
near the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting the
engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to
the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights)
after an accident, reset the system by following
the procedure described below. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
(Continued)
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start
after performing the reset procedure, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
to be inspected and to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SAFETY 193
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SAFETY
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types
of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with
a harness for as long as possible, up to the
highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints
In This Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
SAFETY 199
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located in the panel between the rear
seatback and the rear window. They
are found under a plastic cover with the tether
anchorage symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center
position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle
for the outboard position, do not use that
outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See Ú page 202 to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. See
Ú page 200 for typical installation
instructions.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
SAFETY 201
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 204 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 183 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
SAFETY 203
(Continued)
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether
Anchor with the seat belt to attach
a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a
forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front
passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the
belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR
retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 SAFETY
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 204 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move
the seat forward to provide better access to
the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position,
move the child restraint to another position
in the vehicle if one is available.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See Ú page 198 for the location of approved
tether anchorages in your vehicle.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
SAFETY 205
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor
directly behind the seat where you are
placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
2 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 SAFETY
Center Tether Attachment
1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center
head restraint to the full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback
and head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the center tether anchorage
located in the panel between the rear
seatback and the rear window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
SAFETY 207
(Continued)
(Continued)
with the Air Bag System has been detected. It
will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately Ú page 176.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 SAFETY
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
WARNING! (Continued)
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
SAFETY 209
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
6
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
on the switch bank just above the climate
controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
Flashers may discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 298.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other
Uconnect services will only be operable if
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you will be connected to a representative for
assistance. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the
cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
7
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between
the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously
illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer”.
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer”.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not
intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed.
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility.
Operator error by the SOS operator.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect
features and SiriusXM Guardian™ services when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
7
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under
an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps
to access the jack and spare tire.
NOTE:
The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
(Continued)
3. Rotate the fastener securing the spare tire
counterclockwise to remove it.
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Rotate the fastener securing the jack
counterclockwise to remove it.
Jack Fastener
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly
from under the spare tire. Turn the jack
screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench,
and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
JACKING AND CHANGING A TIRE
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set an
automatic transmission in PARK.
Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jacking Warning Label
Placement for the front and rear jacking
locations are critical. See the following images
for proper jacking locations.
Jacking Locations
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug
wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where
the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the
lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully
before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug
wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug
nuts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the
lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while
the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that
is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle
with the lift area of the sill flange.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 217
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the
flat tire and install the spare tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to
install a center cap or wheel cover on the
compact spare Ú page 276.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the lug nuts.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station
Ú page 287.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
7
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure
the base of the jack faces the front of the
vehicle before tightening down the fastener.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery posts are located on
the right side of the engine compartment for
jump starting.
Jump Starting Locations
NOTE:
The remote battery posts are viewed by
standing on the right side of the vehicle looking
over the fender. The positive battery post may
be covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the
cap to gain access to the positive battery post.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote Negative (-) Post
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post which has a positive (+) symbol on
or around the post.
Jump Starting Posts
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK and
cycle the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake, and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or
either vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
7
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
(exposed metallic/unpainted post of the
discharge vehicle) located directly behind
the under-hood fuse box.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnection procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-) end of the
jumper cable from the remote negative (-)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system tested at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 rpm since it provides no charging
benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster
vehicle engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 221
REFUELING IN AN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel
for a Cap-Less Fuel System. If refueling is
necessary, while using an approved gas can,
please insert the refueling funnel into the filler
neck opening.
Refueling Funnel
Inserting Funnel
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors.
A funnel is provided to allow emergency
refueling with a gas can.
See below steps for refueling
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening
as the fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold
flapper doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off
prior to putting back in the spare tire
storage area.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
7
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
To move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as
a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you should
be seated in the driver's seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 223
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access
the Manual Park Release lever.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
fish the tether strap up through the opening
in the console base.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the
center of the lever, and disengage the lever
locking tab by pushing it to the right.
Engaging The Lever
6. While holding the locking tab in the
disengaged position, pull the tether strap to
rotate the lever up and rearward, until it
locks in place in the vertical position. The
vehicle is now out of PARK and can be
moved. Release the parking brake only
when the vehicle is securely connected to a
tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on
the rear side) rearward (away from the
lever) to unlatch the lever.
Disengaging The Lever
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever
forward and down, to its original position,
until the locking tab snaps into place to
secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm
that the lever is locked in its stowed
position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the
console. Reinstall the console storage bin.
When the lever is in the release position the
access cover cannot be reinstalled.
7
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion,
without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only
be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Push the ESC OFF switch to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
“Partial OFF” mode, before rocking the
vehicle Ú page 161. Once the vehicle has
been freed, push the ESC OFF switch again to
restore “ESC On” mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after
every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 225
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if used,
same limitations as above)
NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED
NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used:
Ignition in ON/RUN mode
Transmission in NEUTRAL (NOT
in PARK)
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
7
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, instructions on shifting
the transmission out of PARK for towing
Ú page 222.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) M ODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If the transmission and driveline are operable,
AWD models can also be towed with the ignition
in the ON/RUN mode, the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N) (not in PARK!), and the rear
wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on
speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST be in
the ON/RUN mode to tow in this manner, AWD
vehicles must be towed with ALL FOUR wheels
OFF the ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the
key fob is unavailable.
REAR WHEEL DRIVE (RWD) MODELS
FCA LLC US recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, this vehicle may be
flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground)
under the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
Instructions on shifting the transmission to
NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off
Ú page 222.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
FCA US LLC does not recommend towing
this vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle
damage may occur.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle using any other method
can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 227
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km),
then the only acceptable method of towing is
with a flatbed truck.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact
Ú page 191.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle Ú page 193.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
7
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for the vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon
as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
The “Oil Change Required” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change
is necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your
next scheduled service.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering (if
equipped) and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Required Maintenance Intervals:
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid (All
Wheel Drive Only).
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel
disc brakes.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
Change the transfer case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of
the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer
towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
X X
Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All
Wheel Drive (AWD) change the front axle fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing.
X X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every month. The best time to check the engine
oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the
reading is at the low end of the dipstick range
will raise the oil level to the high end of the
range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located
in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure
to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a
few seconds to flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply
some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe
the wiper blades clean. This will help blade
performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon
(4 liters) of washer fluid when the message
“Low Washer Fluid” appears in the instrument
cluster.
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, nor is periodic maintenance
required.
NOTE:
The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located
in the engine compartment for jump starting
Ú page 218.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water Ú page 218.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose
that should not be disconnected and
should only be replaced with a battery of
the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L And 5.7L
Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395.
NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approxi-
mately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not
harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a
short distance. Upon restarting, you may experi-
ence a ticking sound. Other causes could be if
the vehicle is unused for an extended period of
time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick
or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends API
Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
(Continued)
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
oil filters and are recommended.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 228.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an
ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING! (Continued)
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
under the hood, behind a removable panel in
the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle,
next to the windshield wipers. When installing a
new cabin air filter, ensure its proper
orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen
by pressing the retaining clips.
Access Door
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the cabin air filter
access cover.
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used cabin air filter.
4. Install the new cabin air filter with arrows
pointing in the direction of airflow, which is
toward the rear of the vehicle (text and
arrows on the cabin air filter will indicate
this).
Cabin Air Filter
5. Close the cabin air filter access cover.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 228.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt
from rib to rib, are considered normal. These
are not a reason to replace belt. However,
cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib
must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if
it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe
glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct
problem before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
these conditions are present, clean the wiper
blades or replace as necessary.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. Slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
4. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade down toward the base of the wiper
arm and away from the J hook in the end of
the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade
under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade onto the arm until
motion stops, then fold down the locking
tab to secure.
NOTE:
The locking tab will not snap into place until the
blade is properly positioned on the wiper arm
hook.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the
ignition when the transmission is in gear and
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
wires disconnected or removed, such as
when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
NOTE:
Your vehicle’s exhaust system may be equipped
with an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system,
if the exhaust system is replaced with after-
market products a Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) will illuminate.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO
Ú page 209.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunc-
tion, particularly involving engine misfire or
other apparent loss of performance, have
your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued
operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to
overheat, resulting in possible damage to
the converter and vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine
coolant is dirty, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the
front of the radiator for any accumulation of
bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 228.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 291.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or
any “globally compatible” coolant. If a
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed
in an emergency, have a authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant will return to the radiator
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery
tank if equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground, clean up any ground
spills immediately. If ingested by a child or pet,
seek emergency assistance immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine off and cold, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator/
coolant pressure cap unless checking for
engine coolant freeze point or replacing
coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant expansion bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which
contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically Ú page 228.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder
immediately if the brake system warning light
indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder
when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up
to the top of the “FULL” mark on the side of the
master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because
it may cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the
requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only brake fluid that has been
recommended by the manufacturer, and has
been kept in a tightly closed container to avoid
contamination from foreign matter or moisture
Ú page 293.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid Ú page 293. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for
your vehicle is also identified on the original
factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the
transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid
(ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid
additives to the transmission. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer's specified transmission fluid
Ú page 293. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder
Ú page 293.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
(Continued)
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The All Wheel Drive system consists of a
transfer case and front differential. The exterior
surface of these components should be
inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed
leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is
located in the middle of the rear housing. To
inspect the transfer case fluid level, remove the
fill/inspection plug. The fluid level should be
even with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug
to add fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the
outer cover near the half shaft attachment. To
inspect the differential fluid level, remove the fill
plug. The fluid level should be even with or
slightly below the bottom of the hole.
Fluid Changes
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 228.
REAR AXLE
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level
Ú page 293.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located
in the engine compartment. This module
contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location
and descriptions are printed on the inside of the
power distribution center cover.
Front Power Distribution Center
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/ functional
fuse element.
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/ not functional
fuse element (blown fuse).
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Front Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
1 – – Fuse – Spare
2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
3 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped
4 30 Amp Pink – Starter
5 40 Amp Green – Anti Lock Brake
6 30 Amp Pink – Anti Lock Brake
7 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
9 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
10 – 10 Amp Red
Intrusion MOD (300) – If Equipped / Under Hood
Lamp – Police
11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
13 – – Fuse – Spare
14 – – Fuse – Spare
15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID Headlamp – If Equipped
16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID Headlamp – If Equipped
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped
20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
21
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
–
Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1
28 – – Fuse – Spare
29 – 15 Amp Blue
Transmission Control Module (Challenger / Charger
Police)
30 – – Fuse – Spare
31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
32 – – Fuse – Spare
33 – – Fuse – Spare
34 – 25 Amp Clear ASD Feed #1
35 – 20 Amp Yellow ASD Feed #2
36 – 10 Amp Red
Anti-Lock Brake Module / Steering Column Lock
Module (300 if equipped)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller
38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
39 – 10 Amp Red
A/C Clutch / EPS – If Equipped / Vacuum Pump – If
Equipped
48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module / Front Axle Disconnect – If Equipped
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise – If Equipped
53 – – Fuse – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Interior Fuses
There is also a power distribution center located
in the trunk under the spare tire access panel.
This center contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity
location and descriptions are printed on the
inside of the power distribution center cover.
Rear Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
2 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #1
3 – – Fuse – Spare
4 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2
5
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
– Sunroof/Dome Lamp – Police
6 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
7 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2
8 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting
9 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control Module
11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Control Module
12 – 20 Amp Yellow
Dual USB Center Console Rear/
+12 Volt Power Outlet IP – If
Equipped / IP APO – If Equipped
15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower
16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp – Police
17 20 Amp Blue – Right Spot Lamp – Police
18 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Interface – Police
19 – – Fuse – Spare
20 – – Fuse – Spare
21 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (Non 6.2L SRT)
22 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Gateway Module
23 – 10 Amp Red
Fuel Door – If Equipped/Diagnostic
Port
24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack
25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor System
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
26 – 15 Amp Blue
Cygnus Transmission Module
(Charger Non - Police/300)
27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier – If Equipped
31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats – If Equipped
32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster
33 – 15 Amp Blue
Ignition Switch/RF Hub Module/
Steering Column Lock (300) – If
Equipped / Remote Start – If
Equipped
34 – 10 Amp Red
Steering Column Module/Clock
(300)
35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
36 – 15 Amp Blue
Electronic Exhaust Valve – If
Equipped
37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
38 – 20 Amp Yellow Media Hub / Console APO
42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost
43 – 20 Amp Yellow
Rear Heated Seats – If Equipped /
Heated Steering Wheel – If
Equipped
44 – 10 Amp Red
Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear
View Camera
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
45 – 15 Amp Blue
Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Lane
Departure
46 – – Fuse – Spare
47 – 10 Amp Red
Adaptive Front Lighting / Day Time
Running Lamps – If Equipped
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow
Front Heated / Vented Seats – If
Equipped
52 – 10 Amp Red
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders/Rear
Heated Seat Switches – If
Equipped
53 – 10 Amp Red
HVAC Module/In Vehicle
Temperature Sensor
54 – – Fuse – Spare
55 – – Fuse – Spare
56 – – Fuse – Spare
57 – – Fuse – Spare
58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Police
60 – – Fuse – Spare
61 – – Fuse – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
62 – – Fuse – Spare
63 – – Fuse – Spare
64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (Charger/300)
65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
66 – – Fuse – Spare
67 – 10 Amp Red
Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof /
Inside RearView Mirror / Police Run
Acc Relay
68 – 10 Amp Red
Rear USB Timer / Rear Sunshade –
If Equipped
69 – – Fuse – Spare
70 – – Fuse – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should
not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp) 9005HL+
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp) D3S (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp PSY24WSV
Front Park Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Daytime Running Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Side marker Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Side marker Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
License LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps —
If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage
discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the headlamp switch off and
the ignition turned to the OFF position. Because
of this, you should not attempt to service a
headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb
fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a
blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10
seconds, as the system charges.
Bi-Halogen Low Beam And High Beam Head-
lamp — If Equipped
See steps below to replace:
1. Open the hood.
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the head-
lamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to
access the headlamp (outboard) bulb cap.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
3. Firmly grab the cap and rotate it counter-
clockwise to unlock it.
4. Twist the headlamp bulb assembly counter-
clockwise, and then pull it out of the
headlamp assembly.
Headlamp Bulb Location
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring
assembly and install the replacement bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb and wiring assembly into
the headlamp assembly, and then turn it
clockwise.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of HID headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause
serious electrical shock or electrocution if not
serviced properly. See an authorized dealer
for service.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
7. Reinstall the access cap making sure it is
seated into the housing and turn cap
clockwise to engage locking lugs. Visually,
you should be unable to see the blue O-ring
gasket. The access cap should be uniformly
seated and you should not be able to pull
the access cap off without turning it
counterclockwise.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
See steps below to replace:
1. Open the hood.
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the head-
lamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to
access the turn signal (inboard) bulb cap.
Turn Signal Bulb Cap
3. Firmly grab the cap and rotate it counter-
clockwise to unlock it.
Turn Signal Bulb Location
4. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb
socket and pull straight out from the lamp
assembly.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring
connector and install the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly
straight into the lamp until it locks in place.
7. Install the turn signal bulb cap in the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to
lock in place.
Front Fog Lamps
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are
not serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp
must be replaced as an assembly; see an
authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The Side Markers must
be replaced as an assembly, see an authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
If the access cap is not installed correctly
after bulb replacement, the lamp becomes
susceptible to dust, condensation, and water
intrusion. This may ultimately lead to an
inoperative lamp. If the access cap cannot be
installed correctly, please return to an
authorized dealer for proper repair or access
cap replacement if necessary.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps
The Rear Backup and Turn Signal Lamp use
LED sources that are not serviceable
separately. The Rear Lamps must be replaced
as an assembly, see an authorized dealer for
further information.
License Lamp
The License Lamp uses an LED source that is
not serviceable separately. The License Lamp
must be replaced as an assembly; see an
authorized dealer.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are
not serviceable separately. The CHMSL Lamp
must be replaced as an assembly; see an
authorized dealer.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading”
Ú page 132.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing Ú page 132.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of 3 hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to
be reused when driven under run flat mode
14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 224.
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed
Ú page 274. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The
Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will
be found on the original equipment tire
sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 263.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
(Continued)
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 138.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow
these recommendations to guard against damage.
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
RWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
Touring Rear
P215/65R17
P225/60R18
Peerless Chain Super Z6 Low
Profile or Equivalent
300C NONE
300S NONE
Limited Rear P225/60R18
Peerless Chain Super Z6 Low
Profile or Equivalent
AWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
Touring
300S
Limited
Rear
235/55R19
P235/55R19
S Class
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals. The
reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed
Ú page 228.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more
than 3 weeks, you may want to take these steps
to protect your battery.
Disconnect the negative cable from the
battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out
of service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
care to never the scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar Total
Clean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water.
Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather seats, as damage to the seat may
result.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
287
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is on the left front corner of the
instrument panel. The VIN is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some loss
of overall braking effectiveness. This may be
evident by increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(for example, repeated brake applications with
the engine OFF), the brakes will still function.
The effort required to brake the vehicle will be
much greater than that required with the power
system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six
sided (hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
9
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Torque Patterns
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of higher octane “premium” gasoline will
not provide any benefit over “regular” gasoline in
these engines.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of
87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of 89 octane “plus” gasoline is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 289
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE /OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
9
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 291
FLUID CAPACITIES
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
5.7L Engine – without Severe Duty II Cooling System 14.5 Quarts 13.9 Liters
5.7L Engine – with Severe Duty II Cooling System 15 Quarts 14.3 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar,
Pennzoil, and Shell Helix Ultra. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
9
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
(Continued)
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar Engine Oil
Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36
Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 method, 0-15% ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 method,
0-15% ethanol.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
CAUTION! (Continued)
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 293
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
Front Axle – AWD (If Equipped)
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90
(API GL-5).
Rear Axle
We recommend you use Mopar OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85
(API GL-5).
Transfer Case – AWD (If Equipped)
We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner
44–40.
9
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for
some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US
LLC's Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 295
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, the FCA US LLC has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with the
FCA US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
10
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further
information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle to keep it operating at its best and
maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 297
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
10
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
299
INDEX
WARRANTY INFORMATION ......................296
A
About Your Brakes
.........................................287
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control)
..............................................109
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............244
Adding Fuel ....................................................131
Adding Washing Fluid ....................................234
Additives, Fuel ...............................................289
Adjust
Forward
....................................................... 32
Rearward.....................................................32
Air Bag ...........................................................185
Advance Front Air Bag ...............................185
Air Bag Operation ......................................186
Air Bag Warning Light ................................184
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................187
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 191 , 227
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................227
Front Air Bag .............................................185
If Deployment Occurs ................................190
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................187
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............. 192
Maintenance ............................................ 192
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............. 185
Side Air Bags ............................................ 187
Transporting Pets ..................................... 206
Air Bag Light.................................. 82 , 184, 206
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ............................. 237
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 237
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 237 , 238
Air Conditioner System ...........................53 , 237
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................58 , 238
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................57
Air Filter ........................................................ 237
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 272
Alarm
Arm The System
...................................20 , 21
Rearm The System ......................................21
Security Alarm ......................................20 , 85
Alarm System
Security Alarm
.............................................20
All Wheel Drive
Towing
...................................................... 226
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ................................... 248
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle ...........................................................8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................. 243 , 291
Disposal .................................................... 245
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ....................... 159
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................86
Arming System
Security Alarm
.............................................20
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 164
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 143
Auto Down Power Windows ..............................65
Automatic Door Locks ......................................25
Automatic Headlights .......................................47
Automatic High Beams .....................................46
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............56
Automatic Transmission ................................ 100
Adding Fluid .....................................247 , 293
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 247
Fluid Change ............................................. 247
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 247
Fluid Type ........................................247 , 293
Special Additives ...................................... 247
11
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300
Automatic Transmission
Limp Home Mode
...................................25 , 104
AutoPark .......................................................... 95
Autostick
Operation
..................................................104
AUX Cord.......................................................... 61
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......... 63
AWD
Towing .......................................................226
Axle Fluid .......................................................293
Axle Lubrication .............................................293
B
Back-Up .........................................................129
Battery ....................................................83 , 234
Charging System Light ................................. 83
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 13
Location ....................................................234
Belts, Seat .....................................................206
Beverage Holder Cooled (Cupholder) .............. 62
Beverage Holder Heated (Cupholder) .............. 62
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................239
B-Pillar Location .............................................267
Brake Assist System ......................................160
Brake Control System ....................................160
Brake Fluid .......................................... 246 , 293
Brake System ...................................... 246 , 287
Fluid Check ...................................... 246 , 293
Master Cylinder ........................................ 246
Parking ........................................................98
Warning Light .....................................82 , 287
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...................... 100
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle .......97
Brightness, Interior Lights ................................50
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 259
Bulbs, Light .......................................... 208 , 259
C
Camera, Rear
................................................ 129
Capacities, Fluid ........................................... 291
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 232
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 244
Car Washes................................................... 284
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................ 209
Cargo
Vehicle Loading ........................................ 132
Cargo Area Cover .............................................71
Cargo Compartment ........................................71
Cellular Phone .............................................. 158
Certification Label ......................................... 133
Chains, Tire ................................................... 280
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 264
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light) .................................................91
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .................. 206
Checks, Safety .............................................. 206
Child Restraint .............................................. 193
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 196
Child Seat Installation ............................... 203
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ..... 201
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 195
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 198
Older Children And Child Restraints .......... 195
Seating Positions ...................................... 197
Child Safety Locks ............................................25
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 289
Cleaning
Wheels ...................................................... 278
Climate Control ................................................53
Automatic ....................................................53
Coin Holder ......................................................59
Cold Weather Operation ...................................96
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 276
Console
Floor ............................................................59
Contract, Service ........................................... 295
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 244
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
301
Cooling System
..............................................243
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .......................244
Coolant Capacity .......................................291
Coolant Level .................................. 243 , 245
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..........................245
Drain, Flush, And Refill ..............................243
Inspection .................................................245
Points To Remember .................................245
Pressure Cap .............................................244
Radiator Cap .............................................244
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 243, 291
Corrosion Protection ......................................283
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............ 107 , 109
Cruise Light .............................................. 89 , 90
Customer Assistance .....................................294
Cybersecurity .................................................143
D
Daytime Running Lights ................................... 46
Dealer Service ...............................................235
Deck Lid
Power Release
............................................ 69
Defroster, Windshield ....................................207
Diagnostic System, Onboard ........................... 90
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ..................................................... 46
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ................................................234
Disable Vehicle Towing ..................................225
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 245
Door Ajar ..........................................................84
Door Ajar Light .................................................84
Door Locks
Automatic
....................................................25
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ....25
Doors ...............................................................21
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................30
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.................................... 141
E
Electric Brake Control System
....................... 160
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 159
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 161 , 165
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................39
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ...249
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 108
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 161
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........84
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 221
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck
..................... 224
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 210
Jacking ..................................................... 214
Jump Starting ........................................... 218
Towing ...................................................... 225
Emission Control System Maintenance ............91
Engine ..................................................232 , 233
Air Cleaner ................................................ 237
Block Heater ................................................97
Break-In Recommendations ........................97
Checking Oil Level .................................... 234
Compartment ..................................232 , 233
Compartment Identification ...................... 232
Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................... 243 , 291
Cooling...................................................... 243
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 209
Fails To Start ................................................96
Flooded, Starting .........................................96
Fuel Requirements ................................... 288
Jump Starting ........................................... 218
Oil ....................................................236 , 291
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 232
Oil Filter .................................................... 236
Oil Selection..................................... 236 , 291
Oil Synthetic .............................................. 236
Overheating .............................................. 222
Starting .................................................93 , 94
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ... 191 , 227
Ethanol.......................................................... 289
Exhaust Gas Cautions ................................... 209
Exhaust System ...................................209 , 241
Exterior Lighting ...............................................45
Exterior Lights ........................................ 45 , 208
11
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
.................................................237
Air Conditioning ..................................58 , 238
Engine Oil ........................................ 236 , 291
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................236
Flashers.........................................................210
Hazard Warning .........................................210
Turn Signals ................................49 , 89, 208
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 47
Flooded Engine Starting .................................. 96
Floor Console ................................................... 59
Fluid Capacities .............................................291
Fluid Leaks ....................................................208
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
........................................................246
Cooling System ..........................................243
Engine Oil ..................................................234
Transfer Case ............................................248
Fluid, Brake ...................................................293
Fog Lights ........................................................48
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 30
Folding Rear Seats .......................................... 31
Forward Collision Warning .............................170
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...............................210
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................224
Fuel............................................................... 288
Additives ................................................... 289
Clean Air ................................................... 289
Ethanol ..................................................... 289
Gasoline ................................................... 288
Gauge ..........................................................87
Materials Added ....................................... 289
Methanol .................................................. 289
Octane Rating .................................. 288 , 291
Requirements ........................................... 288
Specifications ........................................... 291
Tank Capacity ........................................... 291
Fuses ............................................................ 248
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................41
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 289
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 289
Gauges
Fuel
.............................................................87
Gear Ranges ................................................. 101
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 286
Gross Axle Weight Rating ..................... 133 , 134
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ................ 133 , 134
GVWR............................................................ 133
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water
................... 141
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 210
Head Restraints ........................................36 , 37
Head Rests ...............................................36 , 37
Headlights ..................................................... 261
Automatic ....................................................47
Cleaning.................................................... 283
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........46
Lights On Reminder .....................................48
On With Wipers ............................................47
Passing ........................................................47
Switch ..........................................................45
Time Delay ...................................................48
Washers.................................................... 234
Heated Mirrors .................................................41
Heated Seats ...................................................34
Heater, Engine Block ........................................97
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .. 46
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 164
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 136
Holder, Coin .....................................................59
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................41
Hood Prop ........................................................69
Hood Release ...................................................69
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
303
I
Ignition
............................................................ 15
Switch ......................................................... 15
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................38 , 210
Instrument Cluster .................................... 73 , 75
Descriptions ................................................ 89
Display ................................................. 75 , 78
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ....................286
Interior Appearance Care ...............................284
Interior Lights .................................................. 49
J
Jack Location
.................................................214
Jack Operation ...............................................215
Jacking Instructions .......................................215
Jump Starting ................................................218
K
Key Fob
Arm The System
.......................................... 20
Unlatch The Trunk ....................................... 13
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote
Keyless Entry) .................................................. 13
Keyless Enter-N-Go ................................... 22 , 93
Enter The Trunk ........................................... 13
Passive Entry ............................................... 22
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 22
Keys.................................................................12
Replacement ............................................... 14
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals ........................49
Lane Change Assist .........................................49
LaneSense .................................................... 127
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 178
Latches ......................................................... 208
Hood............................................................69
Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 288
Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 208
Life Of Tires ................................................... 274
Light Bulbs ........................................... 208 , 259
Lights ............................................................ 208
Air Bag ...................................... 82 , 184, 206
Automatic Headlights ..................................47
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 163
Brake Warning ....................................82 , 287
Bulb Replacement .................................... 259
Cruise ...................................................89 , 90
Daytime Running .........................................46
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................46
Engine Temperature Warning ......................84
Exterior ..................................................... 208
Fog ..............................................................48
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 210
Headlight Switch ..........................................45
Headlights ...................................45 , 48, 261
Headlights On With Wipers ..........................47
High Beam ...................................................46
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................46
Instrument Cluster .......................................45
Intensity Control ..........................................50
Interior .........................................................49
License ..................................................... 263
Lights On Reminder .....................................48
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........87
Map .............................................................49
Park ......................................................47 , 89
Passing ........................................................47
Reading .......................................................49
Seat Belt Reminder .....................................83
Security Alarm .............................................85
Service...................................................... 259
Traction Control ........................................ 163
Turn Signals ......................... 46 , 49, 89, 208
Vanity Mirror ................................................38
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
.....................................84 , 89
Load Leveling System ......................................72
Load Shed Battery Saver On ............................81
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ..............81
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ...............81
Loading Vehicle .................................... 132 , 133
Capacities ................................................. 133
Tires.......................................................... 267
11
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304
Locks
Auto Unlock
................................................. 25
Automatic Door ........................................... 25
Child Protection ........................................... 25
Power Door.................................................. 22
Low Tire Pressure System .............................172
Lubrication, Body ...........................................239
Lug Nuts ........................................................287
M
Maintenance Free Battery
.............................234
Maintenance Schedule ........................ 228 , 229
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ..... 87
Manual
Park Release
.............................................222
Service ......................................................297
Media Hub ....................................................... 61
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .................... 30
Memory Seat ................................................... 30
Memory Seats And Radio ................................ 30
Methanol .......................................................289
Mirrors ............................................................. 38
Electric Powered .........................................39
Electric Remote ........................................... 39
Heated ........................................................ 41
Outside........................................................ 39
Rearview ............................................38 , 210
Vanity .......................................................... 38
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle........................................................... 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 172
Mopar Parts .................................................. 296
MP3 Control .....................................................61
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................46
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ............................97
O
Occupant Restraints
..................................... 176
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 288, 291
Oil Change Indicator ........................................77
Reset ...........................................................77
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 236
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 236
Oil Pressure Light .............................................85
Oil, Engine............................................ 236 , 291
Capacity.................................................... 291
Checking................................................... 234
Dipstick .................................................... 234
Disposal ................................................... 236
Filter ................................................ 236 , 291
Filter Disposal ........................................... 236
Identification Logo .................................... 236
Materials Added To .................................. 236
Pressure Warning Light ................................85
Recommendation ............................ 236 , 291
Synthetic................................................... 236
Viscosity.................................................... 291
Onboard Diagnostic System .............................90
Operating Precautions .....................................90
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
........................................ 297
Outside Rearview Mirrors .................................39
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 222
P
Paddle Shift Mode
........................................ 104
Paddle Shifters ............................................. 104
Paint Care ..................................................... 283
Parking Brake ..................................................98
ParkSense System, Rear ............................... 120
Passive Entry....................................................22
Pets............................................................... 206
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 267
Power
Brakes
...................................................... 287
Deck Lid Release .........................................69
Distribution Center (Fuses) ....................... 254
Door Locks...................................................22
Mirrors .........................................................39
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .................63
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
305
Seats
...........................................................32
Steering.....................................................106
Sunroof ....................................................... 67
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ...............26
Windows...................................................... 65
Power Seats
Forward ....................................................... 32
Lumbar........................................................33
Rearward.....................................................32
Recline ........................................................32
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...................182
Preparation For Jacking .................................214
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..................................................182
R
Radial Ply Tires
..............................................273
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............244
Radio Operation ............................................158
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 52
Rear Axle (Differential) ...................................248
Rear Camera .................................................129
Rear Cross Path .............................................168
Rear ParkSense System ................................120
Rear Seats, Folding ......................................... 31
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
Towing
.......................................................226
Recreational Towing ..................................... 140
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 289
Refrigerant ........................................... 237 , 238
Release, Hood .................................................69
Reminder, Lights On ........................................48
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 177
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm
.............................................20
Unlatch The Trunk .......................................13
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode
..............................18
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features ....19
Uconnect Settings .......................................19
Remote Trunk Release ....................................69
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 259
Replacement Keys ...........................................14
Replacement Tires ........................................ 274
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 296
Restraints, Child ........................................... 193
Restraints, Head .......................................36 , 37
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ........................ 224
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 281
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle
........................ 206
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 208
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 296
Safety Information, Tire ................................. 263
Safety Tips .................................................... 206
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 209
Schedule, Maintenance ....................... 228 , 229
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................................83
Seat Belts ............................................177 , 206
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 181
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 181
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage .. 181
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 183
Child Restraints ........................................ 193
Energy Management Feature ................... 182
Extender ................................................... 181
Front Seat ...............................177 , 178, 179
Inspection ................................................. 206
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 179
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 180
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................................... 178
Operating Instructions .............................. 179
Pregnant Women ...................................... 182
Pretensioners ........................................... 182
Rear Seat.................................................. 178
Reminder .................................................. 177
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 181
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............................. 182
Untwisting Procedure ................................ 180
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................ 285
11
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306
Seats
................................................. 30 , 32, 34
Adjustment ........................................... 30 , 32
Easy Entry ................................................... 33
Head Restraints ................................... 36 , 37
Heated ........................................................ 34
Height Adjustment ....................................... 32
Power .......................................................... 32
Rear Folding ......................................... 30 , 31
Seatback Release ....................................... 31
Tilting ................................................... 30 , 32
Vented......................................................... 36
Ventilated .................................................... 36
Security Alarm .......................................... 20 , 85
Arm The System .......................................... 20
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................291
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) .................................. 14
Sentry Key Replacement ................................. 14
Service Assistance .........................................294
Service Contract ............................................295
Service Manuals ............................................297
Shifting ............................................................ 99
Automatic Transmission .....................99 , 100
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 178
Side View Mirror Adjustment ............................39
Signals, Turn ....................................49 , 89, 208
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 280
Snow Tires .................................................... 276
Spare Tires ................................. 214 , 276, 277
Spark Plugs ................................................... 291
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ......................................... 291
Oil ............................................................. 291
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ..................................... 108 , 109
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ............................. 113
Cancel ...................................................... 109
Resume .................................................... 109
Set............................................................ 108
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...107, 108, 109
Sport Mode ................................................... 106
Starting .....................................................93 , 94
Automatic Transmission ..............................93
Button .........................................................15
Cold Weather ...............................................96
Engine Fails To Start ....................................96
Starting And Operating ..............................93 , 94
Starting Procedures ..................................93 , 94
Steering ...........................................................26
Column Lock ................................................26
Power........................................................ 106
Tilt Column...................................................26
Wheel, Heated .............................................27
Wheel, Tilt ....................................................26
Storage ......................................................... 283
Storage, Vehicle ..................................... 57 , 283
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 283
Stuck, Freeing ............................................... 224
Sun Roof ..........................................................67
Sunglasses Storage .........................................60
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .... 185
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 236
T
Telescoping Steering Column ...........................26
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............56
Tilt Steering Column .........................................26
Time Delay
Headlight .....................................................48
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
307
Tire And Loading Information Placard
...........267
Tire Markings .................................................263
Tire Safety Information ..................................263
Tires...................................208 , 271, 276, 282
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................274
Air Pressure ...............................................271
Chains .......................................................280
Changing ......................................... 214 , 215
Compact Spare .........................................276
General Information ........................ 271 , 276
High Speed ................................................272
Inflation Pressure ......................................272
Jacking ......................................................215
Life Of Tires ...............................................274
Load Capacity .................................. 267 , 268
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ...........................................88 , 172
Quality Grading ..........................................282
Radial ........................................................273
Replacement .............................................274
Rotation ....................................................281
Safety .............................................. 263 , 271
Sizes..........................................................264
Snow Tires ................................................ 276
Spare Tires .............................214 , 276, 277
Spinning ................................................... 273
Trailer Towing ........................................... 138
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 274
Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 287
To Open Hood ..................................................69
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 137
Towing .......................................................... 134
Behind A Motorhome ................................ 140
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 225
Guide........................................................ 136
Recreational ............................................. 140
Weight ...................................................... 136
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 140
Traction................................................ 140 , 141
Traction Control ............................................ 165
Trailer Towing ............................................... 134
Hitches ..................................................... 136
Minimum Requirements ........................... 137
Tips........................................................... 139
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 137
Wiring ....................................................... 139
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 136
Trailer Weight ................................................ 136
Transfer Case
Fluid.................................................248 , 293
Maintenance ............................................ 248
Transmission................................................. 100
Automatic ........................................100 , 247
Fluid.......................................................... 293
Maintenance ............................................ 247
Shifting ........................................................99
Transporting Pets .......................................... 206
Tread Wear Indicators ................................... 274
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .........................................69
Trunk Release Remote Control ........................69
Turn Signals ..............................................49 , 89
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings
............................. 19 , 144
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With
8.4-Inch Display ............................................ 144
11
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable
Features
..................................19 , 22, 144
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 22
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................282
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................288
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................180
USB ................................................................. 61
V
Vanity Mirrors
..................................................38
Vehicle Certification Label .............................133
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...............287
Vehicle Loading .......................... 132 , 133, 268
Vehicle Maintenance .....................................235
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...................... 8
Vehicle Security Alarm ..................................... 20
Vehicle Storage ......................................57 , 283
Voice Command .............................................. 28
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................ 28
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard ............................. 210
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)....................................................86
Warranty Information .................................... 296
WARRANTY INFORMATION ..................... 296
Washer
Adding Fluid
.............................................. 234
Washers, Windshield .................................... 234
Washing Vehicle ........................................... 284
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 141
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 278
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 278
Wind Buffeting .................................................66
Window Fogging ...............................................58
Windows ..........................................................65
Power...........................................................65
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................66
Windshield Defroster .................................... 207
Windshield Washers ........................................51
Fluid.......................................................... 234
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 240
Windshield Wipers ...........................................51
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 240
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................52
21_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual
that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without
imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 (U.S.)
or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal
injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any
electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and
could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your
full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Chrysler brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment
is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under
license. Chrysler est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple
Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
mopar.com/om
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter
the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
CHRYSLER
_LX_OM_EN_USC
First Edition
2021 Chrysler 300
OWNER’S MANUAL
